1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 266 */ 267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 275 * 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed. 278 * 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 280 * also implies a change in the AID. 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 290 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 304 * changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 309 * context had been assigned. 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 313 * keep alive) changed. 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 320 * 321 */ 322 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 323 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 324 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 325 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 326 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 327 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 328 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 329 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 330 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 331 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 333 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 334 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 335 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 336 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 337 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 338 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 339 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 340 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 341 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 342 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 343 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 344 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 345 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 346 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 347 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 348 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 349 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 350 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 351 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 352 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 353 354 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 355 }; 356 357 /* 358 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 359 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 360 * filtering will be disabled. 361 */ 362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 363 364 /** 365 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 366 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 367 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 368 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 369 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 370 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 371 * once each time the timeout triggers. 372 */ 373 enum ieee80211_event_type { 374 RSSI_EVENT, 375 MLME_EVENT, 376 BAR_RX_EVENT, 377 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 378 }; 379 380 /** 381 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 382 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 383 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 384 */ 385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 386 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 387 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 388 }; 389 390 /** 391 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 392 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 393 */ 394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 395 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 396 }; 397 398 /** 399 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 400 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 401 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 402 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 403 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 404 */ 405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 406 AUTH_EVENT, 407 ASSOC_EVENT, 408 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 409 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 410 }; 411 412 /** 413 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 414 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 415 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 416 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 417 */ 418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 419 MLME_SUCCESS, 420 MLME_DENIED, 421 MLME_TIMEOUT, 422 }; 423 424 /** 425 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 426 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 427 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 428 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 429 */ 430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 431 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 432 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 433 u16 reason; 434 }; 435 436 /** 437 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 438 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 439 * @tid: the tid 440 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 441 */ 442 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 443 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 444 u16 tid; 445 u16 ssn; 446 }; 447 448 /** 449 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 450 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 451 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 452 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 453 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 454 * @u:union holding the fields above 455 */ 456 struct ieee80211_event { 457 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 458 union { 459 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 460 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 461 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 462 } u; 463 }; 464 465 /** 466 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 467 * 468 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 469 * 470 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 471 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 472 */ 473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 474 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 475 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 476 }; 477 478 /** 479 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 480 * 481 * @lci: LCI subelement content 482 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 483 * @lci_len: LCI data length 484 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 485 */ 486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 487 const u8 *lci; 488 const u8 *civicloc; 489 size_t lci_len; 490 size_t civicloc_len; 491 }; 492 493 /** 494 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 495 * 496 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 497 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 498 * 499 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 500 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK 501 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 502 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 503 * ACK, BACK or both 504 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 505 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 506 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 507 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 508 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 509 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 510 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 511 * @assoc: association status 512 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS 513 * or not 514 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 515 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 516 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 517 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 518 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 519 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 520 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 521 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 522 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 523 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 524 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 525 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 526 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 527 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 528 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 529 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 530 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 531 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 532 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 533 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 534 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 535 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 536 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 537 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 538 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 539 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 540 * the current band. 541 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 542 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 543 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 544 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 545 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 546 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 547 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 548 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 549 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 550 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 551 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 552 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 553 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 554 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 555 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 556 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 557 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 558 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 559 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 560 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 561 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 562 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 563 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 564 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 565 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 566 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 567 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 568 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 569 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 570 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 571 * your driver/device needs to do. 572 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 573 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 574 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 575 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 576 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 577 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 578 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 579 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 580 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 581 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 582 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 583 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 584 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 585 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 586 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 587 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 588 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 589 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 590 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 591 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 592 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 593 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 594 * station. 595 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 596 * responder functionality. 597 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 598 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 599 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 600 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 601 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 602 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 603 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 604 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 605 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 606 * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to 607 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 608 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 609 */ 610 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 611 const u8 *bssid; 612 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 613 bool multi_sta_back_32bit; 614 bool uora_exists; 615 bool ack_enabled; 616 u8 uora_ocw_range; 617 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 618 bool he_support; 619 bool twt_requester; 620 bool twt_responder; 621 /* association related data */ 622 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 623 bool ibss_creator; 624 u16 aid; 625 /* erp related data */ 626 bool use_cts_prot; 627 bool use_short_preamble; 628 bool use_short_slot; 629 bool enable_beacon; 630 u8 dtim_period; 631 u16 beacon_int; 632 u16 assoc_capability; 633 u64 sync_tsf; 634 u32 sync_device_ts; 635 u8 sync_dtim_count; 636 u32 basic_rates; 637 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 638 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 639 u16 ht_operation_mode; 640 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 641 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 642 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 643 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 644 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 645 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 646 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 647 int arp_addr_cnt; 648 bool qos; 649 bool idle; 650 bool ps; 651 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 652 size_t ssid_len; 653 bool hidden_ssid; 654 int txpower; 655 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 656 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 657 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 658 u16 max_idle_period; 659 bool protected_keep_alive; 660 bool ftm_responder; 661 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 662 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 663 bool nontransmitted; 664 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 665 u8 bssid_index; 666 u8 bssid_indicator; 667 bool ema_ap; 668 u8 profile_periodicity; 669 struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation; 670 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 671 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 672 }; 673 674 /** 675 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 676 * 677 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 678 * 679 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 680 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 681 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 682 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 683 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 684 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 685 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 686 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 687 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 688 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 689 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 690 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 691 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 692 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 693 * station 694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 695 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 696 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 697 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 698 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 699 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 700 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 701 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 702 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 703 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 704 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 705 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 706 * hardware queue. 707 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 708 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 709 * is for the whole aggregation. 710 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 711 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 713 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 714 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 715 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 716 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 717 * off-channel operation. 718 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 719 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 720 * it can be sent out. 721 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 722 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 723 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 724 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 726 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 727 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 729 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 730 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 731 * queue gets full. 732 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 733 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 734 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 735 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 736 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 737 * should kick the MLME state machine. 738 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 739 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 740 * status to user space) 741 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 742 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 743 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 744 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 745 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 746 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 747 * handled properly by the device. 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 749 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 750 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 752 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 753 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 755 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 756 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 757 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 758 * PS-Poll responses. 759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 760 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 761 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 762 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 763 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 764 * monitor injection). 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 766 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 767 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 768 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 769 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 770 * 771 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 772 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 773 */ 774 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 775 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 776 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 777 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 778 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 779 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 780 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 781 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 782 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 783 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 784 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 785 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 786 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 787 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 788 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 789 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14), 790 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 791 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 792 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 793 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 794 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 795 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 796 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 797 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 798 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 799 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 800 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 801 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 802 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 804 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 805 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 806 }; 807 808 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 809 810 /** 811 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 812 * 813 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 814 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 816 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 819 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 820 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 821 * 822 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 823 */ 824 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 825 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 826 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 827 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 828 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 829 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 830 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(6), 832 }; 833 834 /* 835 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 836 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 837 */ 838 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 839 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 840 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 842 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 844 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 845 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 846 847 /** 848 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 849 * Rate Control algorithm. 850 * 851 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 852 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 853 * 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 855 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 856 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 857 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 860 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 861 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 862 * Greenfield mode. 863 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 864 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 865 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 866 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 867 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 868 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 869 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 870 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 871 */ 872 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 873 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 874 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 875 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 876 877 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 878 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 879 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 880 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 881 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 882 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 883 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 884 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 885 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 886 }; 887 888 889 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 891 892 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 893 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 894 895 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 896 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 897 898 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 899 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 900 901 /** 902 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 903 * 904 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 905 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 906 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 907 * 908 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 909 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 910 * 911 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 912 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 913 * 914 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 915 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 916 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 917 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 918 * information:: 919 * 920 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 921 * 922 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 923 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 924 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 925 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 926 * information should then contain:: 927 * 928 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 929 * 930 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 931 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 932 */ 933 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 934 s8 idx; 935 u16 count:5, 936 flags:11; 937 } __packed; 938 939 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 940 941 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 942 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 943 { 944 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 945 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 946 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 947 } 948 949 static inline u8 950 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 951 { 952 return rate->idx & 0xF; 953 } 954 955 static inline u8 956 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 957 { 958 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 959 } 960 961 /** 962 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 963 * 964 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 965 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 966 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 967 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 968 * 969 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 970 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races) 971 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 972 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 973 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 974 * @control: union part for control data 975 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 976 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 977 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 978 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 979 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 980 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 981 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 982 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 983 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 984 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 985 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 986 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 987 * @pad: padding 988 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 989 * @status: union part for status data 990 * @status.rates: attempted rates 991 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 992 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 993 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 994 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 995 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission 996 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid 997 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 998 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 999 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1000 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1001 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1002 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1003 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1004 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1005 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1006 */ 1007 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1008 /* common information */ 1009 u32 flags; 1010 u32 band:3, 1011 ack_frame_id:13, 1012 hw_queue:4, 1013 tx_time_est:10; 1014 /* 2 free bits */ 1015 1016 union { 1017 struct { 1018 union { 1019 /* rate control */ 1020 struct { 1021 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1022 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1023 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1024 u8 use_rts:1; 1025 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1026 u8 short_preamble:1; 1027 u8 skip_table:1; 1028 /* 2 bytes free */ 1029 }; 1030 /* only needed before rate control */ 1031 unsigned long jiffies; 1032 }; 1033 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1035 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1036 u32 flags; 1037 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1038 } control; 1039 struct { 1040 u64 cookie; 1041 } ack; 1042 struct { 1043 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1044 s32 ack_signal; 1045 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1046 u8 ampdu_len; 1047 u8 antenna; 1048 u16 tx_time; 1049 bool is_valid_ack_signal; 1050 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)]; 1051 } status; 1052 struct { 1053 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1054 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1055 u8 pad[4]; 1056 1057 void *rate_driver_data[ 1058 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1059 }; 1060 void *driver_data[ 1061 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1062 }; 1063 }; 1064 1065 static inline u16 1066 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1067 { 1068 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1069 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1070 */ 1071 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1072 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1073 } 1074 1075 static inline u16 1076 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1077 { 1078 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1079 } 1080 1081 /** 1082 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1083 * 1084 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1085 * @info: Basic tx status information 1086 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1087 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet 1088 */ 1089 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1090 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1091 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1092 struct sk_buff *skb; 1093 struct rate_info *rate; 1094 }; 1095 1096 /** 1097 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1098 * 1099 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1100 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1101 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1102 * 1103 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1104 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1105 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1106 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1107 */ 1108 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1109 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1110 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1111 const u8 *common_ies; 1112 size_t common_ie_len; 1113 }; 1114 1115 1116 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1117 { 1118 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1119 } 1120 1121 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1122 { 1123 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1124 } 1125 1126 /** 1127 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1128 * 1129 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1130 * 1131 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1132 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1133 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1134 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1135 * 1136 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use 1137 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data 1138 * instead if you need only the less space that allows. 1139 */ 1140 static inline void 1141 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1142 { 1143 int i; 1144 1145 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1146 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1147 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1148 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1149 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1150 /* clear the rate counts */ 1151 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1152 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1153 1154 BUILD_BUG_ON( 1155 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20); 1156 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0, 1157 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) - 1158 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len)); 1159 } 1160 1161 1162 /** 1163 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1164 * 1165 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1166 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1167 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1168 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1169 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1170 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1171 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1172 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1173 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1174 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1175 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1176 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1177 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1178 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1179 * de-duplication by itself. 1180 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1181 * the frame. 1182 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1183 * the frame. 1184 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1185 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1186 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1187 * merging. 1188 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1189 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1190 * (including FCS) was received. 1191 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1192 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1193 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1194 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1195 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1196 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1197 * each A-MPDU 1198 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1199 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1200 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1201 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1202 * on this subframe 1203 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1204 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1205 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1206 * done by the hardware 1207 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1208 * processing it in any regular way. 1209 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1210 * them for sniffing purposes. 1211 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1212 * monitor interfaces. 1213 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1214 * them for sniffing purposes. 1215 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1216 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1217 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1218 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1219 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1220 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1221 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1222 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1223 * interleaved with other frames. 1224 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1225 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1226 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1227 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1228 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1229 * the first subframe. 1230 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1231 * be done in the hardware. 1232 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1233 * frame 1234 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1235 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1236 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1237 * 1238 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1239 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1240 * - DATA3_CODING 1241 * - DATA5_GI 1242 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1243 * - DATA6_NSTS 1244 * - DATA3_STBC 1245 * 1246 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1247 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1248 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1249 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1250 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1251 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1252 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1253 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1254 */ 1255 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1256 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1257 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1258 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1259 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1260 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1261 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1262 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1263 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1264 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1265 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1266 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1267 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1268 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1269 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1270 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1271 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1272 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1273 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1274 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1275 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1276 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1277 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1278 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1279 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1280 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1281 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1282 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1283 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1284 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1285 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1286 }; 1287 1288 /** 1289 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1290 * 1291 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1292 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1293 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1294 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1295 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1296 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1297 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1298 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1299 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1300 */ 1301 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1302 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1303 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1304 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1305 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1306 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1307 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1308 }; 1309 1310 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1311 1312 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1313 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1314 RX_ENC_HT, 1315 RX_ENC_VHT, 1316 RX_ENC_HE, 1317 }; 1318 1319 /** 1320 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1321 * 1322 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1323 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1324 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1325 * 1326 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1327 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1328 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1329 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1330 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1331 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1332 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1333 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1334 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1335 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1336 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1337 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1338 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1339 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1340 * values were filled. 1341 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1342 * support dB or unspecified units) 1343 * @antenna: antenna used 1344 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1345 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1346 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1347 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1348 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1349 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1350 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1351 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1352 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1353 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1354 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1355 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1356 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1357 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1358 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1359 */ 1360 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1361 u64 mactime; 1362 u64 boottime_ns; 1363 u32 device_timestamp; 1364 u32 ampdu_reference; 1365 u32 flag; 1366 u16 freq; 1367 u8 enc_flags; 1368 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1369 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1370 u8 rate_idx; 1371 u8 nss; 1372 u8 rx_flags; 1373 u8 band; 1374 u8 antenna; 1375 s8 signal; 1376 u8 chains; 1377 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1378 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1379 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1380 }; 1381 1382 /** 1383 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1384 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1385 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1386 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1387 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1388 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1389 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1390 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1391 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1392 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1393 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1394 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1395 * @data field. 1396 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1397 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1398 * length 1399 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1400 * 1401 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1402 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1403 * data. 1404 */ 1405 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1406 u32 present; 1407 u8 align; 1408 u8 oui[3]; 1409 u8 subns; 1410 u8 pad; 1411 u16 len; 1412 u8 data[]; 1413 } __packed; 1414 1415 /** 1416 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1417 * 1418 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1419 * 1420 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1421 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1422 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1423 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1424 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1425 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1426 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1427 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1428 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1429 * for more. 1430 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1431 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1432 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1433 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1434 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1435 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1436 * operating channel. 1437 */ 1438 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1439 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1440 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1441 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1442 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1443 }; 1444 1445 1446 /** 1447 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1448 * 1449 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1450 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1451 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1452 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1453 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1454 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1455 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1456 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1457 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1458 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1459 */ 1460 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1461 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1462 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1463 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1464 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1465 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1466 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1467 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1468 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1469 }; 1470 1471 /** 1472 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1473 * 1474 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1475 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1476 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1477 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1478 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1479 */ 1480 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1481 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1482 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1483 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1484 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1485 1486 /* keep last */ 1487 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1488 }; 1489 1490 /** 1491 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1492 * 1493 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1494 * 1495 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1496 * 1497 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1498 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1499 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1500 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1501 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1502 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1503 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1504 * 1505 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1506 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1507 * 1508 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1509 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1510 * 1511 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1512 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1513 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1514 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1515 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1516 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1517 * 1518 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1519 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1520 * configured for an HT channel. 1521 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1522 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1523 */ 1524 struct ieee80211_conf { 1525 u32 flags; 1526 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1527 1528 u16 listen_interval; 1529 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1530 1531 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1532 1533 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1534 bool radar_enabled; 1535 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1536 }; 1537 1538 /** 1539 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1540 * 1541 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1542 * operation. 1543 * 1544 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1545 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1546 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1547 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1548 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1549 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1550 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1551 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1552 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1553 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1554 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1555 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1556 * channel, expressed in TU. 1557 */ 1558 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1559 u64 timestamp; 1560 u32 device_timestamp; 1561 bool block_tx; 1562 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1563 u8 count; 1564 u32 delay; 1565 }; 1566 1567 /** 1568 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1569 * 1570 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1571 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1572 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1573 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1574 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1575 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1576 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1577 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1578 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1579 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1580 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1581 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1582 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1583 */ 1584 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1585 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1586 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1587 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1588 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1589 }; 1590 1591 /** 1592 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1593 * 1594 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1595 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1596 * 1597 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1598 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1599 * or the BSS we're associated to 1600 * @addr: address of this interface 1601 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1602 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1603 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 1604 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 1605 * for read access. 1606 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 1607 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1608 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1609 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1610 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1611 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1612 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1613 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 1614 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 1615 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 1616 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 1617 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 1618 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1619 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1620 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1621 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1622 * interface. 1623 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1624 * sizeof(void \*). 1625 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1626 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1627 * protected by fq->lock. 1628 */ 1629 struct ieee80211_vif { 1630 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1631 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1632 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1633 bool p2p; 1634 bool csa_active; 1635 bool mu_mimo_owner; 1636 1637 u8 cab_queue; 1638 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1639 1640 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1641 1642 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 1643 1644 u32 driver_flags; 1645 1646 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1647 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1648 #endif 1649 1650 unsigned int probe_req_reg; 1651 1652 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1653 1654 /* must be last */ 1655 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1656 }; 1657 1658 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1659 { 1660 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1661 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1662 #endif 1663 return false; 1664 } 1665 1666 /** 1667 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1668 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1669 * 1670 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1671 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1672 * 1673 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1674 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1675 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1676 */ 1677 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1678 1679 /** 1680 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1681 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1682 * 1683 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1684 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1685 * 1686 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1687 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1688 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1689 */ 1690 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1691 1692 /** 1693 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1694 * 1695 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1696 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1697 * 1698 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1699 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1700 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1701 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1702 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1703 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1704 * generation in software. 1705 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1706 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1707 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1708 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1709 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1710 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1711 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1712 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1713 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1714 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1715 * MIC. 1716 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1717 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1718 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1719 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1720 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1721 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1722 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1723 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1724 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1725 * only for management frames (MFP). 1726 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1727 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1728 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1729 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1730 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1731 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1732 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1733 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1734 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1735 * generation only 1736 */ 1737 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1738 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1739 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1740 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1741 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1742 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1743 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1744 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1745 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1746 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1747 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1748 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1749 }; 1750 1751 /** 1752 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1753 * 1754 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1755 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1756 * 1757 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1758 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1759 * encrypted in hardware. 1760 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1761 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1762 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1763 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1764 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1765 * @keylen: key material length 1766 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1767 * data block: 1768 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1769 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1770 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1771 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1772 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1773 */ 1774 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1775 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1776 u32 cipher; 1777 u8 icv_len; 1778 u8 iv_len; 1779 u8 hw_key_idx; 1780 s8 keyidx; 1781 u16 flags; 1782 u8 keylen; 1783 u8 key[0]; 1784 }; 1785 1786 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1787 1788 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1789 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1790 1791 /** 1792 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1793 * 1794 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1795 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1796 * reverse order than in packet) 1797 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1798 * reverse order than in packet) 1799 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1800 * reverse order than in packet) 1801 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1802 * reverse order than in packet) 1803 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1804 */ 1805 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1806 union { 1807 struct { 1808 u32 iv32; 1809 u16 iv16; 1810 } tkip; 1811 struct { 1812 u8 pn[6]; 1813 } ccmp; 1814 struct { 1815 u8 pn[6]; 1816 } aes_cmac; 1817 struct { 1818 u8 pn[6]; 1819 } aes_gmac; 1820 struct { 1821 u8 pn[6]; 1822 } gcmp; 1823 struct { 1824 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1825 u8 seq_len; 1826 } hw; 1827 }; 1828 }; 1829 1830 /** 1831 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme 1832 * 1833 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining 1834 * the secure packet crypto handling. 1835 * 1836 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector 1837 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage 1838 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher 1839 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header 1840 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header 1841 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header 1842 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits 1843 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx 1844 * key_idx value calculation: 1845 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift 1846 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes 1847 */ 1848 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme { 1849 u32 cipher; 1850 u16 iftype; 1851 u8 hdr_len; 1852 u8 pn_len; 1853 u8 pn_off; 1854 u8 key_idx_off; 1855 u8 key_idx_mask; 1856 u8 key_idx_shift; 1857 u8 mic_len; 1858 }; 1859 1860 /** 1861 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1862 * 1863 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1864 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1865 * 1866 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1867 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1868 */ 1869 enum set_key_cmd { 1870 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 1871 }; 1872 1873 /** 1874 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 1875 * 1876 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 1877 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 1878 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 1879 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 1880 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 1881 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 1882 */ 1883 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 1884 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 1885 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 1886 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 1887 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 1888 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 1889 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 1890 }; 1891 1892 /** 1893 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 1894 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 1895 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 1896 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 1897 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 1898 * (including 80+80 MHz) 1899 * 1900 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 1901 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 1902 */ 1903 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 1904 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 1905 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 1906 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 1907 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 1908 }; 1909 1910 /** 1911 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 1912 * 1913 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 1914 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 1915 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 1916 */ 1917 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 1918 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 1919 struct { 1920 s8 idx; 1921 u8 count; 1922 u8 count_cts; 1923 u8 count_rts; 1924 u16 flags; 1925 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 1926 }; 1927 1928 /** 1929 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 1930 * 1931 * Used to configure txpower for station. 1932 * 1933 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 1934 * to the STA. 1935 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 1936 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 1937 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 1938 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 1939 * per peer TPC. 1940 */ 1941 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 1942 s16 power; 1943 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 1944 }; 1945 1946 /** 1947 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 1948 * 1949 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 1950 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 1951 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 1952 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 1953 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 1954 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 1955 * 1956 * @addr: MAC address 1957 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 1958 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band) 1959 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 1960 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 1961 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 1962 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 1963 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 1964 * Can be modified by driver. 1965 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 1966 * otherwise always false) 1967 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1968 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 1969 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 1970 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 1971 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 1972 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 1973 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 1974 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 1975 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 1976 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 1977 * the station moves to associated state. 1978 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 1979 * @rates: rate control selection table 1980 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 1981 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 1982 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 1983 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 1984 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 1985 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 1986 * unlimited. 1987 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 1988 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 1989 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 1990 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 1991 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 1992 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 1993 */ 1994 struct ieee80211_sta { 1995 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1996 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 1997 u16 aid; 1998 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 1999 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2000 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2001 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2002 bool wme; 2003 u8 uapsd_queues; 2004 u8 max_sp; 2005 u8 rx_nss; 2006 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2007 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2008 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2009 bool tdls; 2010 bool tdls_initiator; 2011 bool mfp; 2012 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2013 2014 /** 2015 * @max_amsdu_len: 2016 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2017 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2018 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2019 * 2020 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2021 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2022 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2023 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2024 * 2025 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2026 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2027 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2028 */ 2029 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2030 bool support_p2p_ps; 2031 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2032 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2033 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2034 2035 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2036 2037 /* must be last */ 2038 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2039 }; 2040 2041 /** 2042 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2043 * 2044 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2045 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2046 * 2047 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2048 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2049 */ 2050 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2051 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2052 }; 2053 2054 /** 2055 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2056 * 2057 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2058 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2059 */ 2060 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2061 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2062 }; 2063 2064 /** 2065 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2066 * 2067 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2068 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2069 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2070 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2071 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2072 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2073 * 2074 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2075 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2076 */ 2077 struct ieee80211_txq { 2078 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2079 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2080 u8 tid; 2081 u8 ac; 2082 2083 /* must be last */ 2084 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2085 }; 2086 2087 /** 2088 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2089 * 2090 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2091 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2092 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2093 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2094 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2095 * 2096 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2097 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2098 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2099 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2100 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2101 * algorithm. 2102 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2103 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2104 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2105 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2106 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2107 * CCK frames. 2108 * 2109 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2110 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2111 * the FCS at the end. 2112 * 2113 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2114 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2115 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2116 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2117 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2118 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2119 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2120 * 2121 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2122 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2123 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2124 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2125 * 2126 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2127 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2128 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2129 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2130 * 2131 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2132 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2133 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2134 * 2135 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2136 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2137 * 2138 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2139 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2140 * 2141 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2142 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2143 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2144 * 2145 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2146 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2147 * 2148 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2149 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2150 * 2151 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2152 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2153 * the stack. 2154 * 2155 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2156 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2157 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2158 * 2159 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2160 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2161 * dtim_period). 2162 * 2163 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2164 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2165 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2166 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2167 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2168 * only in that case. 2169 * 2170 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2171 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2172 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2173 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2174 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2175 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2176 * 2177 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2178 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2179 * software. 2180 * 2181 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2182 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2183 * active interfaces. 2184 * 2185 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2186 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2187 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2188 * 2189 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2190 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2191 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2192 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2193 * supported cipher suites. 2194 * 2195 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2196 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2197 * for frames. 2198 * 2199 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2200 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2201 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2202 * control for more details. 2203 * 2204 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2205 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2206 * 2207 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2208 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2209 * is supported. 2210 * 2211 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2212 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2213 * 2214 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2215 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2216 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2217 * 2218 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2219 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2220 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2221 * CSA frame. 2222 * 2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2224 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2225 * 2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2227 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2228 * 2229 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2230 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2231 * 2232 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2233 * within A-MPDU. 2234 * 2235 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2236 * for sent beacons. 2237 * 2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2239 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2240 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2241 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2242 * 2243 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2244 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2245 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2246 * timeout. 2247 * 2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2249 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2250 * 2251 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2252 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2253 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2254 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2255 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2256 * 2257 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2258 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2259 * 2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2261 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2262 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2263 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2264 * 2265 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2266 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2267 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2268 * 2269 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2270 * TDLS links. 2271 * 2272 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2273 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2274 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2275 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2276 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2277 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2278 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2279 * 2280 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2281 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2282 * 2283 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2284 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2285 * 2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2287 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2288 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2289 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2290 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2291 * 2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2293 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2294 * TXQs to start with. 2295 * 2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2297 * length in tx status information 2298 * 2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2300 * 2301 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2302 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2303 * 2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2305 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2306 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2307 * 2308 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2309 */ 2310 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2311 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2312 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2313 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2314 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2315 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2316 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2317 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2318 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2319 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2320 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2321 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2322 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2323 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2324 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2325 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2326 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2327 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2328 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2329 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2330 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2331 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2332 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2333 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2334 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2335 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2336 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2337 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2338 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2339 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2340 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2341 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2342 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2343 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2344 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2345 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2346 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2347 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2348 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2349 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2350 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2351 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2352 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2353 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2354 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2355 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2356 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2357 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2358 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2359 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2360 2361 /* keep last, obviously */ 2362 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2363 }; 2364 2365 /** 2366 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2367 * 2368 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2369 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2370 * 2371 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2372 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2373 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2374 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2375 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2376 * 2377 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2378 * 2379 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2380 * along with this structure. 2381 * 2382 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2383 * 2384 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2385 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2386 * 2387 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2388 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2389 * 2390 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2391 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2392 * 2393 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2394 * that HW supports 2395 * 2396 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2397 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2398 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2399 * 2400 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2401 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2402 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2403 * 2404 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2405 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2406 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2407 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2408 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2409 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2410 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2411 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2412 * 2413 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2414 * can handle. 2415 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2416 * the hw can report back. 2417 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2418 * 2419 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2420 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2421 * aggregation. 2422 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2423 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2424 * it shouldn't be set. 2425 * 2426 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2427 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2428 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2429 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2430 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2431 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2432 * 2433 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2434 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2435 * 2436 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2437 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2438 * 2439 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2440 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2441 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2442 * adding _BW is supported today. 2443 * 2444 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2445 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2446 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2447 * 2448 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2449 * 2450 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2451 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2452 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2453 * device_timestamp. 2454 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2455 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2456 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2457 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2458 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2459 * 2460 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2461 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2462 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2463 * 2464 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2465 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2466 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2467 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2468 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2469 * neither enabled. 2470 * 2471 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2472 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2473 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2474 * 2475 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions. 2476 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions 2477 * supported by HW. 2478 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2479 * device. 2480 * 2481 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2482 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2483 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2484 * 2485 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2486 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2487 * 2488 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2489 */ 2490 struct ieee80211_hw { 2491 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2492 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2493 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2494 void *priv; 2495 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2496 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2497 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2498 int vif_data_size; 2499 int sta_data_size; 2500 int chanctx_data_size; 2501 int txq_data_size; 2502 u16 queues; 2503 u16 max_listen_interval; 2504 s8 max_signal; 2505 u8 max_rates; 2506 u8 max_report_rates; 2507 u8 max_rate_tries; 2508 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2509 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2510 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2511 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2512 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2513 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2514 struct { 2515 int units_pos; 2516 s16 accuracy; 2517 } radiotap_timestamp; 2518 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2519 u8 uapsd_queues; 2520 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2521 u8 n_cipher_schemes; 2522 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes; 2523 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2524 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2525 u8 weight_multiplier; 2526 u32 max_mtu; 2527 }; 2528 2529 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2530 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2531 { 2532 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2533 } 2534 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2535 2536 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2537 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2538 { 2539 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2540 } 2541 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2542 2543 /** 2544 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2545 * 2546 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2547 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2548 */ 2549 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2550 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2551 2552 /* Keep last */ 2553 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2554 }; 2555 2556 /** 2557 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2558 * 2559 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2560 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2561 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2562 * @status: channel-switch response status 2563 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2564 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2565 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2566 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2567 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2568 */ 2569 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2570 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2571 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2572 u8 action_code; 2573 u32 status; 2574 u32 timestamp; 2575 u16 switch_time; 2576 u16 switch_timeout; 2577 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2578 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2579 }; 2580 2581 /** 2582 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2583 * 2584 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2585 * 2586 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2587 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2588 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2589 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2590 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2591 * 2592 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2593 */ 2594 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2595 2596 /** 2597 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2598 * 2599 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2600 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2601 */ 2602 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2603 { 2604 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2605 } 2606 2607 /** 2608 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2609 * 2610 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2611 * @addr: the address to set 2612 */ 2613 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2614 { 2615 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2616 } 2617 2618 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2619 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2620 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2621 { 2622 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2623 return NULL; 2624 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2625 } 2626 2627 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2628 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2629 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2630 { 2631 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2632 return NULL; 2633 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2634 } 2635 2636 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2637 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2638 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2639 { 2640 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2641 return NULL; 2642 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2643 } 2644 2645 /** 2646 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2647 * @hw: the hardware 2648 * @skb: the skb 2649 * 2650 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2651 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2652 */ 2653 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2654 2655 /** 2656 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2657 * 2658 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2659 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2660 * 2661 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2662 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2663 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2664 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2665 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2666 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2667 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2668 * 2669 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2670 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2671 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2672 * 2673 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2674 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2675 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2676 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2677 * 2678 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2679 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2680 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2681 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2682 * 2683 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2684 * 2685 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2686 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2687 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2688 * based on the receive flags. 2689 * 2690 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2691 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2692 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2693 * keys. 2694 * 2695 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2696 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2697 * handler. 2698 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2699 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2700 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2701 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2702 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2703 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2704 * 2705 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2706 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2707 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2708 * 2709 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2710 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following 2711 * requirements: 2712 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to 2713 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been 2714 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key, 2715 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2716 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2717 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2718 encrypted with the new key and 2719 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2720 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2721 */ 2722 2723 /** 2724 * DOC: Powersave support 2725 * 2726 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2727 * 2728 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2729 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2730 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2731 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2732 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2733 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2734 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2735 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2736 * 2737 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2738 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2739 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2740 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2741 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2742 * 2743 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2744 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2745 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2746 * 2747 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2748 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2749 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2750 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2751 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2752 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2753 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2754 * 2755 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2756 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2757 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2758 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2759 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2760 * periods. 2761 * 2762 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2763 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2764 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2765 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2766 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2767 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2768 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2769 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2770 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2771 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2772 * 2773 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2774 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2775 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2776 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2777 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2778 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2779 * 2780 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2781 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2782 */ 2783 2784 /** 2785 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2786 * 2787 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2788 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2789 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2790 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2791 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2792 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2793 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2794 * 2795 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2796 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2797 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2798 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2799 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2800 * 2801 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2802 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2803 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2804 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2805 * 2806 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2807 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2808 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 2809 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 2810 * 2811 * - a list of information element IDs 2812 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 2813 * 2814 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 2815 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 2816 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 2817 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 2818 * vendor information elements. 2819 * 2820 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 2821 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 2822 * 2823 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 2824 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 2825 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 2826 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 2827 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 2828 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 2829 * 2830 * 2831 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 2832 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 2833 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 2834 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 2835 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 2836 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 2837 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 2838 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 2839 * 2840 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 2841 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 2842 * signal strength threshold checking. 2843 */ 2844 2845 /** 2846 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 2847 * 2848 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 2849 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 2850 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 2851 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 2852 * 2853 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 2854 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 2855 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 2856 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 2857 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 2858 * hardware flags. 2859 * 2860 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 2861 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 2862 * turned off otherwise. 2863 * 2864 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 2865 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 2866 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 2867 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 2868 */ 2869 2870 /** 2871 * DOC: Frame filtering 2872 * 2873 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 2874 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 2875 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 2876 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 2877 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 2878 * 2879 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 2880 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 2881 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 2882 * 2883 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 2884 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 2885 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 2886 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 2887 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 2888 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 2889 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 2890 * 2891 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 2892 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 2893 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 2894 * or dropped. 2895 * 2896 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 2897 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 2898 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 2899 * the flag, but not clear it. 2900 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 2901 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 2902 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 2903 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 2904 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 2905 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 2906 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 2907 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 2908 */ 2909 2910 /** 2911 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 2912 * 2913 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 2914 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 2915 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 2916 * 2917 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 2918 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 2919 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 2920 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 2921 * the driver code. 2922 * 2923 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 2924 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 2925 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 2926 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 2927 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 2928 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 2929 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 2930 * 2931 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 2932 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 2933 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 2934 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 2935 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 2936 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 2937 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 2938 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 2939 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 2940 * @sta_notify callback. 2941 * 2942 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 2943 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 2944 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 2945 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 2946 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 2947 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 2948 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 2949 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 2950 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 2951 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 2952 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 2953 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 2954 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 2955 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 2956 * 2957 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 2958 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 2959 * 2960 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 2961 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 2962 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 2963 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 2964 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 2965 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 2966 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 2967 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 2968 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 2969 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 2970 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 2971 * 2972 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 2973 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 2974 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 2975 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 2976 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 2977 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 2978 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 2979 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 2980 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 2981 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 2982 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 2983 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 2984 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 2985 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 2986 * 2987 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 2988 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 2989 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 2990 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 2991 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 2992 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 2993 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 2994 * 2995 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 2996 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 2997 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 2998 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 2999 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3000 * 3001 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3002 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3003 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3004 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3005 */ 3006 3007 /** 3008 * DOC: HW queue control 3009 * 3010 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3011 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3012 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3013 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3014 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3015 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3016 * 3017 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3018 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3019 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3020 * 3021 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3022 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3023 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3024 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3025 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3026 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3027 * the hardware queue. 3028 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3029 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3030 * 3031 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3032 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3033 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3034 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3035 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3036 * 3037 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3038 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3039 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3040 * off-channel queue: 9 3041 * 3042 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3043 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3044 * 3045 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3046 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3047 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3048 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3049 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3050 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3051 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3052 * 3053 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3054 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3055 * 3056 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3057 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3058 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3059 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3060 */ 3061 3062 /** 3063 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3064 * 3065 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3066 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3067 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3068 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3069 * 3070 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3071 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3072 * multicast address. 3073 * 3074 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3075 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3076 * 3077 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3078 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3079 * 3080 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3081 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3082 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3083 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3084 * honour this flag if possible. 3085 * 3086 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3087 * station 3088 * 3089 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3090 * 3091 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3092 * 3093 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3094 */ 3095 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3096 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3097 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3098 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3099 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3100 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3101 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3102 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3103 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3104 }; 3105 3106 /** 3107 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3108 * 3109 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3110 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3111 * 3112 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3113 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3114 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3115 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3116 * 3117 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3118 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3119 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3120 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or return the special 3121 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3122 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3123 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3124 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3125 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3126 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3127 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3128 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3129 * session is gone and removes the station. 3130 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3131 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3132 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3133 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3134 */ 3135 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3136 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3137 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3138 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3139 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3140 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3141 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3142 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3143 }; 3144 3145 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3146 3147 /** 3148 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3149 * 3150 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3151 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3152 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3153 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3154 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3155 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3156 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3157 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3158 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3159 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3160 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3161 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3162 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3163 */ 3164 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3165 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3166 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3167 u16 tid; 3168 u16 ssn; 3169 u16 buf_size; 3170 bool amsdu; 3171 u16 timeout; 3172 }; 3173 3174 /** 3175 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3176 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3177 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3178 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3179 */ 3180 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3181 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3182 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3183 }; 3184 3185 /** 3186 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3187 * 3188 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3189 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3190 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3191 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3192 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3193 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3194 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3195 * the peer. 3196 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3197 * by the peer 3198 */ 3199 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3200 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3201 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3202 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3203 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3204 }; 3205 3206 /** 3207 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3208 * 3209 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3210 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3211 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3212 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3213 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3214 * 3215 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3216 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3217 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3218 */ 3219 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3220 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3221 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3222 }; 3223 3224 /** 3225 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type 3226 * 3227 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3228 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3229 * 3230 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3231 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3232 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3233 * of wowlan configuration) 3234 */ 3235 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3236 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3237 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3238 }; 3239 3240 /** 3241 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3242 * 3243 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3244 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3245 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3246 * 3247 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3248 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3249 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3250 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3251 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3252 * Must be atomic. 3253 * 3254 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3255 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3256 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3257 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3258 * or zero. 3259 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3260 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3261 * is added. 3262 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3263 * 3264 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3265 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3266 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3267 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3268 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3269 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3270 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3271 * 3272 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3273 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3274 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3275 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3276 * reconfigured at resume time. 3277 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3278 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3279 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3280 * must return 1 from this function. 3281 * 3282 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3283 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3284 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3285 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3286 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3287 * 3288 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3289 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3290 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3291 * in suspend(). 3292 * 3293 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3294 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3295 * and @stop must be implemented. 3296 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3297 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3298 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3299 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3300 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3301 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3302 * 3303 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3304 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3305 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3306 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3307 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3308 * 3309 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3310 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3311 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3312 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3313 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3314 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3315 * MAC address of the device going away. 3316 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3317 * 3318 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3319 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3320 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3321 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3322 * 3323 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3324 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3325 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3326 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3327 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3328 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3329 * can sleep. 3330 * 3331 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3332 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3333 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3334 * 3335 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3336 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3337 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3338 * 3339 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3340 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3341 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3342 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3343 * which flags are changed. 3344 * This callback can sleep. 3345 * 3346 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3347 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3348 * 3349 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3350 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3351 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3352 * is enabled. 3353 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3354 * The callback can sleep. 3355 * 3356 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3357 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3358 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3359 * The callback must be atomic. 3360 * 3361 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3362 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3363 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3364 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3365 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3366 * 3367 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3368 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3369 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3370 * 3371 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3372 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3373 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3374 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3375 * that power save is disabled. 3376 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3377 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3378 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3379 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3380 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3381 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3382 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3383 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3384 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3385 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3386 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3387 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3388 * The callback can sleep. 3389 * 3390 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3391 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3392 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3393 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3394 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3395 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3396 * The callback can sleep. 3397 * 3398 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3399 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3400 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3401 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3402 * 3403 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3404 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3405 * 3406 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3407 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3408 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3409 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3410 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3411 * 3412 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3413 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3414 * this notification. 3415 * The callback can sleep. 3416 * 3417 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3418 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3419 * The callback can sleep. 3420 * 3421 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3422 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3423 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3424 * The callback must be atomic. 3425 * 3426 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3427 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3428 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3429 * should be set as well. 3430 * The callback can sleep. 3431 * 3432 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3433 * The callback can sleep. 3434 * 3435 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3436 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3437 * 3438 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3439 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3440 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3441 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3442 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3443 * This callback can sleep. 3444 * 3445 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3446 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3447 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3448 * callback can sleep. 3449 * 3450 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3451 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3452 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3453 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3454 * 3455 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3456 * power for the station. 3457 * This callback can sleep. 3458 * 3459 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3460 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3461 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3462 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3463 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3464 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3465 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3466 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3467 * The callback can sleep. 3468 * 3469 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3470 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3471 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3472 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3473 * in @sta_state. 3474 * The callback can sleep. 3475 * 3476 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3477 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3478 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3479 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3480 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3481 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3482 * Must be atomic. 3483 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3484 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3485 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3486 * 3487 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3488 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3489 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3490 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3491 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3492 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3493 * The callback can sleep. 3494 * 3495 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3496 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3497 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3498 * The callback can sleep. 3499 * 3500 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3501 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3502 * required function. 3503 * The callback can sleep. 3504 * 3505 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3506 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3507 * required function. 3508 * The callback can sleep. 3509 * 3510 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3511 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3512 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3513 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3514 * The callback can sleep. 3515 * 3516 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3517 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3518 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3519 * TSF synchronization. 3520 * The callback can sleep. 3521 * 3522 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3523 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3524 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3525 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3526 * The callback can sleep. 3527 * 3528 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3529 * 3530 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3531 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3532 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3533 * The callback can sleep. 3534 * 3535 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3536 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3537 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3538 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3539 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3540 * 3541 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3542 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3543 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3544 * 3545 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3546 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3547 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3548 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3549 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3550 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3551 * The callback can sleep. 3552 * 3553 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3554 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3555 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3556 * completion of the channel switch. 3557 * 3558 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3559 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3560 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3561 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3562 * 3563 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3564 * 3565 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3566 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3567 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3568 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3569 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3570 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3571 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3572 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3573 * must be accepted in this case. 3574 * This callback may sleep. 3575 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3576 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3577 * 3578 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3579 * 3580 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3581 * 3582 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3583 * queues before entering power save. 3584 * 3585 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3586 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3587 * The callback can sleep. 3588 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3589 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3590 * The callback must be atomic. 3591 * 3592 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3593 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3594 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3595 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3596 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3597 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3598 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3599 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3600 * more-data bit must always be set. 3601 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3602 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3603 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3604 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3605 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3606 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3607 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3608 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3609 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3610 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3611 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3612 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3613 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3614 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3615 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3616 * This callback must be atomic. 3617 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3618 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3619 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3620 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3621 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3622 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3623 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3624 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3625 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3626 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3627 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3628 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3629 * This callback must be atomic. 3630 * 3631 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3632 * 3633 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3634 * 3635 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3636 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3637 * 3638 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3639 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3640 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3641 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3642 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3643 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3644 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3645 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3646 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3647 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3648 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3649 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3650 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3651 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3652 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the 3653 * duration for which the operation is requested. 3654 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3655 * 3656 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3657 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3658 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3659 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3660 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3661 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3662 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3663 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3664 * 3665 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3666 * This callback may sleep. 3667 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3668 * This callback may sleep. 3669 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3670 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3671 * channel context with different settings 3672 * This callback may sleep. 3673 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3674 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3675 * This callback may sleep. 3676 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3677 * unbound from vif. 3678 * This callback may sleep. 3679 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3680 * another, as specified in the list of 3681 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3682 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3683 * This callback may sleep. 3684 * 3685 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3686 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3687 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3688 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3689 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3690 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3691 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3692 * 3693 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3694 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3695 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3696 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3697 * This callback may sleep. 3698 * 3699 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3700 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3701 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3702 * 3703 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3704 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3705 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3706 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3707 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3708 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3709 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3710 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3711 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3712 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3713 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3714 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3715 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3716 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3717 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3718 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3719 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3720 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3721 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3722 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3723 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3724 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3725 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3726 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3727 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3728 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3729 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3730 * 3731 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3732 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3733 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3734 * 3735 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3736 * and hardware limits. 3737 * 3738 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3739 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3740 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3741 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3742 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3743 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3744 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3745 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3746 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3747 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3748 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3749 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3750 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3751 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3752 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3753 * the function call. 3754 * 3755 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3756 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3757 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3758 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3759 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3760 * 3761 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3762 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3763 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3764 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3765 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3766 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 3767 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 3768 * changed parameters. 3769 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 3770 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 3771 * this call. 3772 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 3773 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 3774 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 3775 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 3776 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 3777 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 3778 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 3779 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 3780 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 3781 * 3782 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 3783 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 3784 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 3785 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 3786 * This callback may sleep. 3787 */ 3788 struct ieee80211_ops { 3789 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3790 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 3791 struct sk_buff *skb); 3792 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3793 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3794 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 3795 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 3796 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3797 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 3798 #endif 3799 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3801 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3803 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 3804 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3806 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 3807 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3809 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 3810 u32 changed); 3811 3812 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3813 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3814 3815 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3816 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 3817 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3818 unsigned int changed_flags, 3819 unsigned int *total_flags, 3820 u64 multicast); 3821 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3822 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3823 unsigned int filter_flags, 3824 unsigned int changed_flags); 3825 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3826 bool set); 3827 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 3828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3829 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 3830 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3832 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 3833 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3834 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 3835 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3837 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 3838 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3839 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 3840 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3841 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 3842 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3844 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3846 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 3847 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 3848 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3850 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3851 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3852 const u8 *mac_addr); 3853 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3855 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3856 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 3857 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3858 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 3859 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 3860 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3861 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 3862 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3863 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3864 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3865 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3866 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 3867 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3868 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3869 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3870 struct dentry *dir); 3871 #endif 3872 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3873 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3874 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3876 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3877 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3878 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3879 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 3880 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 3881 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3883 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3884 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3885 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3886 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3887 u32 changed); 3888 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3889 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3890 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 3891 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3892 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3893 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3894 struct station_info *sinfo); 3895 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3896 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 3897 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 3898 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3899 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3900 u64 tsf); 3901 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3902 s64 offset); 3903 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3904 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3905 3906 /** 3907 * @ampdu_action: 3908 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 3909 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 3910 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 3911 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3912 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 3913 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 3914 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 3915 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 3916 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 3917 * 3918 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 3919 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 3920 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 3921 * 3922 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 3923 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 3924 * 3925 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 3926 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 3927 * - ``TX: 81`` 3928 * 3929 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 3930 * 3931 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 3932 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 3933 * if the session can start immediately. 3934 * 3935 * The callback can sleep. 3936 */ 3937 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3939 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 3940 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 3941 struct survey_info *survey); 3942 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3943 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 3944 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 3945 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3946 void *data, int len); 3947 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 3948 struct netlink_callback *cb, 3949 void *data, int len); 3950 #endif 3951 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3952 u32 queues, bool drop); 3953 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3954 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3955 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 3956 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 3957 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 3958 3959 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3960 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3961 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 3962 int duration, 3963 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 3964 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 3966 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 3967 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3968 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 3969 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 3970 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3971 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 3972 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3973 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3974 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 3975 3976 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3977 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3978 u16 tids, int num_frames, 3979 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 3980 bool more_data); 3981 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3982 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 3983 u16 tids, int num_frames, 3984 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 3985 bool more_data); 3986 3987 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 3989 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3990 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3991 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 3992 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3993 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3994 u32 sset, u8 *data); 3995 3996 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3997 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 3998 u16 duration); 3999 4000 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4001 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4002 4003 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4004 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4005 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4006 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4007 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4008 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4009 u32 changed); 4010 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4011 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4012 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4013 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4015 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4016 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4017 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4018 int n_vifs, 4019 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4020 4021 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4022 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4023 4024 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4025 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4027 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4028 #endif 4029 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4031 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4032 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4034 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4035 4036 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4037 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4038 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4039 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4040 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4042 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4043 4044 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4045 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4046 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4047 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4048 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4049 int *dbm); 4050 4051 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4053 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4054 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4055 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4056 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4058 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4059 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4061 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4062 4063 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4064 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4065 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4066 4067 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4069 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4070 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4072 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4073 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4074 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4075 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4076 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4077 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4078 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4079 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4080 u8 instance_id); 4081 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4082 struct sk_buff *head, 4083 struct sk_buff *skb); 4084 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4085 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4086 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4087 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4088 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4089 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4090 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4091 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4092 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4093 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4094 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4095 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4096 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4097 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4098 }; 4099 4100 /** 4101 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4102 * 4103 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4104 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4105 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4106 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4107 * @priv_data_len. 4108 * 4109 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4110 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4111 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4112 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4113 * 4114 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4115 */ 4116 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4117 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4118 const char *requested_name); 4119 4120 /** 4121 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4122 * 4123 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4124 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4125 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4126 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4127 * @priv_data_len. 4128 * 4129 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4130 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4131 * 4132 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4133 */ 4134 static inline 4135 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4136 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4137 { 4138 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4139 } 4140 4141 /** 4142 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4143 * 4144 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4145 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4146 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4147 * 4148 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4149 * 4150 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4151 */ 4152 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4153 4154 /** 4155 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4156 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4157 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4158 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4159 */ 4160 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4161 int throughput; 4162 int blink_time; 4163 }; 4164 4165 /** 4166 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4167 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4168 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4169 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4170 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4171 */ 4172 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4173 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4174 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4175 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4176 }; 4177 4178 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4179 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4180 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4181 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4182 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4183 const char * 4184 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4185 unsigned int flags, 4186 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4187 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4188 #endif 4189 /** 4190 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4191 * 4192 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4193 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4194 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4195 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4196 * 4197 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4198 * 4199 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4200 */ 4201 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4202 { 4203 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4204 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4205 #else 4206 return NULL; 4207 #endif 4208 } 4209 4210 /** 4211 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4212 * 4213 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4214 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4215 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4216 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4217 * 4218 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4219 * 4220 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4221 */ 4222 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4223 { 4224 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4225 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4226 #else 4227 return NULL; 4228 #endif 4229 } 4230 4231 /** 4232 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4233 * 4234 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4235 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4236 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4237 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4238 * 4239 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4240 * 4241 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4242 */ 4243 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4244 { 4245 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4246 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4247 #else 4248 return NULL; 4249 #endif 4250 } 4251 4252 /** 4253 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4254 * 4255 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4256 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4257 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4258 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4259 * 4260 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4261 * 4262 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4263 */ 4264 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4265 { 4266 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4267 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4268 #else 4269 return NULL; 4270 #endif 4271 } 4272 4273 /** 4274 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4275 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4276 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4277 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4278 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4279 * 4280 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4281 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4282 * 4283 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4284 */ 4285 static inline const char * 4286 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4287 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4288 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4289 { 4290 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4291 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4292 blink_table_len); 4293 #else 4294 return NULL; 4295 #endif 4296 } 4297 4298 /** 4299 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4300 * 4301 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4302 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4303 * 4304 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4305 */ 4306 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4307 4308 /** 4309 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4310 * 4311 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4312 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4313 * before calling this function. 4314 * 4315 * @hw: the hardware to free 4316 */ 4317 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4318 4319 /** 4320 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4321 * 4322 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4323 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4324 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4325 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4326 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4327 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4328 * 4329 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4330 */ 4331 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4332 4333 /** 4334 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4335 * 4336 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4337 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4338 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4339 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4340 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4341 * 4342 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4343 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4344 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4345 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4346 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4347 * 4348 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4349 * 4350 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4351 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4352 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4353 * @napi: the NAPI context 4354 */ 4355 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4356 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4357 4358 /** 4359 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4360 * 4361 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4362 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4363 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4364 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4365 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4366 * 4367 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4368 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4369 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4370 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4371 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4372 * 4373 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4374 * 4375 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4376 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4377 */ 4378 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4379 { 4380 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4381 } 4382 4383 /** 4384 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4385 * 4386 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4387 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4388 * 4389 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4390 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4391 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4392 * 4393 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4394 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4395 */ 4396 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4397 4398 /** 4399 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4400 * 4401 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4402 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4403 * 4404 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4405 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4406 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4407 * 4408 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4409 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4410 */ 4411 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4412 struct sk_buff *skb) 4413 { 4414 local_bh_disable(); 4415 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4416 local_bh_enable(); 4417 } 4418 4419 /** 4420 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4421 * 4422 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4423 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4424 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4425 * 4426 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4427 * 4428 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4429 * each other. 4430 * 4431 * @sta: currently connected sta 4432 * @start: start or stop PS 4433 * 4434 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4435 */ 4436 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4437 4438 /** 4439 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4440 * (in process context) 4441 * 4442 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4443 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4444 * applies. 4445 * 4446 * @sta: currently connected sta 4447 * @start: start or stop PS 4448 * 4449 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4450 */ 4451 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4452 bool start) 4453 { 4454 int ret; 4455 4456 local_bh_disable(); 4457 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4458 local_bh_enable(); 4459 4460 return ret; 4461 } 4462 4463 /** 4464 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4465 * @sta: currently connected station 4466 * 4467 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4468 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4469 * connected station was received. 4470 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4471 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4472 * be serialized. 4473 */ 4474 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4475 4476 /** 4477 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4478 * @sta: currently connected station 4479 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4480 * 4481 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4482 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4483 * from a connected station was received. 4484 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4485 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4486 * serialized. 4487 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4488 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4489 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4490 * checks. 4491 */ 4492 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4493 4494 /* 4495 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4496 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4497 */ 4498 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4499 4500 /** 4501 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4502 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4503 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4504 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4505 * 4506 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4507 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4508 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4509 * 4510 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4511 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4512 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4513 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4514 * 4515 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4516 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4517 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4518 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4519 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4520 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4521 * 4522 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4523 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4524 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4525 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4526 * use this API. 4527 */ 4528 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4529 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4530 4531 /** 4532 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4533 * 4534 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4535 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4536 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4537 * 4538 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4539 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4540 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4541 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4542 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4543 */ 4544 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4545 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4546 struct sk_buff *skb, 4547 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4548 int max_rates); 4549 4550 /** 4551 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4552 * 4553 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4554 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4555 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4556 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4557 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4558 * slow stations to starve). 4559 * 4560 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4561 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4562 */ 4563 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4564 u32 thr); 4565 4566 /** 4567 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4568 * 4569 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4570 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4571 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4572 * 4573 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4574 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4575 * @info: tx status information 4576 */ 4577 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4578 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4579 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4580 4581 /** 4582 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4583 * 4584 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4585 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4586 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4587 * 4588 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4589 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4590 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4591 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4592 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4593 * 4594 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4595 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4596 */ 4597 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4598 struct sk_buff *skb); 4599 4600 /** 4601 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4602 * 4603 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4604 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4605 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4606 * 4607 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4608 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4609 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4610 * 4611 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4612 * @status: tx status information 4613 */ 4614 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4615 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4616 4617 /** 4618 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4619 * 4620 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4621 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4622 * specific skbs. 4623 * 4624 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4625 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4626 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4627 * 4628 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4629 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4630 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4631 * @info: tx status information 4632 */ 4633 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4634 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4635 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4636 { 4637 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4638 .sta = sta, 4639 .info = info, 4640 }; 4641 4642 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4643 } 4644 4645 /** 4646 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4647 * 4648 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4649 * 4650 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4651 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4652 * for a single hardware. 4653 * 4654 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4655 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4656 */ 4657 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4658 struct sk_buff *skb) 4659 { 4660 local_bh_disable(); 4661 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4662 local_bh_enable(); 4663 } 4664 4665 /** 4666 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 4667 * 4668 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 4669 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4670 * 4671 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4672 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4673 * 4674 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4675 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4676 */ 4677 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4678 struct sk_buff *skb); 4679 4680 /** 4681 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 4682 * 4683 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 4684 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 4685 * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 4686 * 802.11 frames. 4687 * 4688 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4689 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 4690 * calls in the same tx status family. 4691 * 4692 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4693 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 4694 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4695 */ 4696 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4697 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4698 struct sk_buff *skb); 4699 4700 /** 4701 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 4702 * 4703 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 4704 * connected STA. 4705 * 4706 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 4707 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 4708 */ 4709 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 4710 4711 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2 4712 4713 /** 4714 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 4715 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 4716 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 4717 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 4718 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which 4719 * should be ignored. 4720 */ 4721 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 4722 u16 tim_offset; 4723 u16 tim_length; 4724 4725 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM]; 4726 }; 4727 4728 /** 4729 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 4730 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4731 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4732 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 4733 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 4734 * 4735 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4736 * obtain the beacon template. 4737 * 4738 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 4739 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 4740 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 4741 * applicable, the CSA count. 4742 * 4743 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4744 * 4745 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4746 */ 4747 struct sk_buff * 4748 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4749 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4750 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs); 4751 4752 /** 4753 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 4754 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4755 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4756 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 4757 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4758 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 4759 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 4760 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 4761 * 4762 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 4763 * obtain the beacon frame. 4764 * 4765 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4766 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 4767 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 4768 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 4769 * 4770 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 4771 * 4772 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 4773 */ 4774 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4775 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4776 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length); 4777 4778 /** 4779 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 4780 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4782 * 4783 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4784 * 4785 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 4786 */ 4787 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4788 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 4789 { 4790 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL); 4791 } 4792 4793 /** 4794 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter 4795 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4796 * 4797 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 4798 * This function is called implicitly when 4799 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 4800 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 4801 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters. 4802 * 4803 * Return: new csa counter value 4804 */ 4805 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4806 4807 /** 4808 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter 4809 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4810 * @counter: the new value for the counter 4811 * 4812 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be 4813 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 4814 * 4815 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(), 4816 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 4817 */ 4818 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 4819 4820 /** 4821 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 4822 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4823 * 4824 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 4825 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 4826 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 4827 */ 4828 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4829 4830 /** 4831 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1 4832 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4833 * 4834 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero. 4835 */ 4836 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4837 4838 4839 /** 4840 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 4841 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4842 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4843 * 4844 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4845 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 4846 * 4847 * Can only be called in AP mode. 4848 * 4849 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 4850 */ 4851 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4853 4854 /** 4855 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 4856 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4857 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4858 * 4859 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 4860 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4861 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 4862 * 4863 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4864 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 4865 * 4866 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 4867 */ 4868 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4870 4871 /** 4872 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 4873 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4875 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 4876 * if at all possible 4877 * 4878 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 4879 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 4880 * BSSID and address is used. 4881 * 4882 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 4883 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 4884 * 4885 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 4886 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 4887 * 4888 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 4889 */ 4890 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4891 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4892 bool qos_ok); 4893 4894 /** 4895 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 4896 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4897 * @src_addr: source MAC address 4898 * @ssid: SSID buffer 4899 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 4900 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 4901 * 4902 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 4903 * hardware. 4904 * 4905 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 4906 */ 4907 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4908 const u8 *src_addr, 4909 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 4910 size_t tailroom); 4911 4912 /** 4913 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 4914 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4915 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4916 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 4917 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 4918 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4919 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 4920 * 4921 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4922 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4923 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 4924 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 4925 */ 4926 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4927 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 4928 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 4929 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 4930 4931 /** 4932 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 4933 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4934 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4935 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 4936 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4937 * 4938 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 4939 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4940 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 4941 * 4942 * Return: The duration. 4943 */ 4944 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4945 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 4946 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 4947 4948 /** 4949 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 4950 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4952 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 4953 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 4954 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4955 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 4956 * 4957 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 4958 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4959 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 4960 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 4961 */ 4962 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4964 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 4965 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 4966 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 4967 4968 /** 4969 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 4970 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4971 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4972 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 4973 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 4974 * 4975 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 4976 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 4977 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 4978 * 4979 * Return: The duration. 4980 */ 4981 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4983 size_t frame_len, 4984 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 4985 4986 /** 4987 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 4988 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 4989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4990 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 4991 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 4992 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 4993 * 4994 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 4995 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 4996 * 4997 * Return: The duration. 4998 */ 4999 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5000 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5001 enum nl80211_band band, 5002 size_t frame_len, 5003 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5004 5005 /** 5006 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5007 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5008 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5009 * 5010 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5011 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5012 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5013 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5014 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5015 * 5016 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5017 * frames are available. 5018 * 5019 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5020 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5021 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5022 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5023 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5024 * use common code for all beacons. 5025 */ 5026 struct sk_buff * 5027 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5028 5029 /** 5030 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5031 * 5032 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5033 * 5034 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5035 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5036 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5037 */ 5038 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5039 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5040 5041 /** 5042 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5043 * 5044 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5045 * from the given packet. 5046 * 5047 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5048 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5049 * with this P1K 5050 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5051 */ 5052 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5053 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5054 { 5055 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5056 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5057 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5058 5059 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5060 } 5061 5062 /** 5063 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5064 * 5065 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5066 * and transmitter address. 5067 * 5068 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5069 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5070 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5071 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5072 */ 5073 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5074 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5075 5076 /** 5077 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5078 * 5079 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5080 * in the packet. 5081 * 5082 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5083 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5084 * encrypted with this key 5085 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5086 */ 5087 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5088 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5089 5090 /** 5091 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5092 * 5093 * @pos: start of crypto header 5094 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5095 * @pn: PN to add 5096 * 5097 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5098 * the packet payload) 5099 * 5100 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5101 * point to the crypto header) 5102 */ 5103 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5104 5105 /** 5106 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5107 * 5108 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5109 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5110 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5111 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5112 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5113 * 5114 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5115 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5116 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5117 * 5118 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5119 * can be done concurrently. 5120 */ 5121 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5122 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5123 5124 /** 5125 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5126 * 5127 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5128 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5129 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5130 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5131 * @seq: new sequence data 5132 * 5133 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5134 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5135 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5136 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5137 * 5138 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5139 * can be done concurrently. 5140 */ 5141 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5142 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5143 5144 /** 5145 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5146 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5147 * 5148 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5149 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5150 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5151 * 5152 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5153 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5154 */ 5155 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5156 5157 /** 5158 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5159 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5160 * @keyconf: new key data 5161 * 5162 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5163 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5164 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5165 * 5166 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5167 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5168 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5169 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5170 * 5171 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5172 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5173 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5174 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5175 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5176 * of the reconfiguration. 5177 * 5178 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5179 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5180 * 5181 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5182 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5183 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5184 * the key that's being replaced. 5185 */ 5186 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5187 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5188 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5189 5190 /** 5191 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5192 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5193 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5194 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5195 * @gfp: allocation flags 5196 */ 5197 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5198 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5199 5200 /** 5201 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5202 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5203 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5204 * 5205 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5206 */ 5207 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5208 5209 /** 5210 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5211 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5212 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5213 * 5214 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5215 */ 5216 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5217 5218 /** 5219 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5220 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5221 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5222 * 5223 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5224 * 5225 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5226 */ 5227 5228 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5229 5230 /** 5231 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5232 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5233 * 5234 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5235 */ 5236 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5237 5238 /** 5239 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5240 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5241 * 5242 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5243 */ 5244 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5245 5246 /** 5247 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5248 * 5249 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5250 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5251 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5252 * any context, including hardirq context. 5253 * 5254 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5255 * @info: information about the completed scan 5256 */ 5257 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5258 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5259 5260 /** 5261 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5262 * 5263 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5264 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5265 * 5266 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5267 */ 5268 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5269 5270 /** 5271 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5272 * 5273 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5274 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5275 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5276 * while associating, for instance. 5277 * 5278 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5279 */ 5280 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5281 5282 /** 5283 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5284 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5285 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5286 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5287 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5288 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5289 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5290 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5291 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5292 */ 5293 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5294 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5295 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5296 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5297 }; 5298 5299 /** 5300 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5301 * 5302 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5303 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5304 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5305 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5306 * 5307 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5308 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5309 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5310 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5311 */ 5312 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5313 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5315 void *data); 5316 5317 /** 5318 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5319 * 5320 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5321 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5322 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5323 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5324 * be used. 5325 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5326 * 5327 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5328 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5329 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5330 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5331 */ 5332 static inline void 5333 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5334 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5335 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5336 void *data) 5337 { 5338 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5339 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5340 iterator, data); 5341 } 5342 5343 /** 5344 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5345 * 5346 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5347 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5348 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5349 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5350 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5351 * 5352 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5353 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5354 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5355 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5356 */ 5357 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5358 u32 iter_flags, 5359 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5360 u8 *mac, 5361 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5362 void *data); 5363 5364 /** 5365 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces 5366 * 5367 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5368 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5369 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL. 5370 * 5371 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5372 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5373 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5374 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5375 */ 5376 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5377 u32 iter_flags, 5378 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5379 u8 *mac, 5380 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5381 void *data); 5382 5383 /** 5384 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5385 * 5386 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5387 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5388 * function for them. 5389 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5390 * 5391 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5392 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5393 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5394 */ 5395 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5396 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5397 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5398 void *data); 5399 /** 5400 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5401 * 5402 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5403 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5404 * 5405 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5406 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5407 */ 5408 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5409 5410 /** 5411 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5412 * 5413 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5414 * workqueue. 5415 * 5416 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5417 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5418 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5419 */ 5420 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5421 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5422 unsigned long delay); 5423 5424 /** 5425 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5426 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5427 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5428 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5429 * 5430 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5431 * 5432 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5433 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5434 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5435 */ 5436 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5437 u16 timeout); 5438 5439 /** 5440 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5441 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5442 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5443 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5444 * 5445 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5446 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5447 * from any context. 5448 */ 5449 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5450 u16 tid); 5451 5452 /** 5453 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5454 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5455 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5456 * 5457 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5458 * 5459 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5460 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5461 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5462 */ 5463 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5464 5465 /** 5466 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5467 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5468 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5469 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5470 * 5471 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5472 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5473 * can be called from any context. 5474 */ 5475 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5476 u16 tid); 5477 5478 /** 5479 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5480 * 5481 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5482 * @addr: station's address 5483 * 5484 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5485 * 5486 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5487 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5488 */ 5489 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5490 const u8 *addr); 5491 5492 /** 5493 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5494 * 5495 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5496 * @addr: remote station's address 5497 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5498 * 5499 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5500 * 5501 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5502 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5503 * 5504 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5505 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5506 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5507 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5508 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5509 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5510 * is not reliable. 5511 * 5512 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5513 */ 5514 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5515 const u8 *addr, 5516 const u8 *localaddr); 5517 5518 /** 5519 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5520 * @hw: the hardware 5521 * @pubsta: the station 5522 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5523 * 5524 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5525 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5526 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5527 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5528 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5529 * 5530 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5531 * manner. 5532 * 5533 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5534 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5535 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5536 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5537 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5538 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5539 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5540 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5541 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5542 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5543 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5544 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5545 * woke up while blocked or not. 5546 */ 5547 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5548 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5549 5550 /** 5551 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5552 * @pubsta: the station 5553 * 5554 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5555 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5556 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5557 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5558 * 5559 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5560 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5561 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5562 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5563 * 5564 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5565 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5566 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5567 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5568 */ 5569 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5570 5571 /** 5572 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5573 * @pubsta: the station 5574 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5575 * 5576 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5577 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5578 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5579 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5580 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5581 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5582 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5583 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5584 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5585 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5586 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5587 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5588 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5589 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5590 */ 5591 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5592 5593 /** 5594 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5595 * 5596 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call 5597 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5598 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5599 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5600 * 5601 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 5602 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 5603 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 5604 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 5605 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 5606 * attempts. 5607 * 5608 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 5609 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 5610 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 5611 * them to 0. 5612 * 5613 * @pubsta: the station 5614 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 5615 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 5616 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 5617 */ 5618 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5619 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 5620 5621 /** 5622 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 5623 * 5624 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5625 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 5626 * 5627 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 5628 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 5629 */ 5630 bool 5631 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5632 5633 /** 5634 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 5635 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5636 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5637 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5638 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5639 * 5640 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5641 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5642 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 5643 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 5644 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 5645 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 5646 * 5647 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 5648 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 5649 * set_key callback. 5650 */ 5651 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5653 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5654 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5655 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5656 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5657 void *data), 5658 void *iter_data); 5659 5660 /** 5661 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 5662 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5663 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 5664 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 5665 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 5666 * 5667 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 5668 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 5669 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 5670 * in removal process will be skipped. 5671 * 5672 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 5673 * and thus iter must be atomic. 5674 */ 5675 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5676 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5677 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5678 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5679 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5680 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 5681 void *data), 5682 void *iter_data); 5683 5684 /** 5685 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 5686 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5687 * @iter: iterator function 5688 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 5689 * 5690 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 5691 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 5692 * places while calling into the driver. 5693 * 5694 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 5695 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 5696 * removed. 5697 * 5698 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 5699 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 5700 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 5701 * or not. 5702 */ 5703 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 5704 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5705 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5706 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 5707 void *data), 5708 void *iter_data); 5709 5710 /** 5711 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5712 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5713 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5714 * 5715 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5716 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 5717 * information. This function must only be called from within the 5718 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 5719 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 5720 * %NULL. 5721 * 5722 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5723 */ 5724 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5725 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5726 5727 /** 5728 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 5729 * 5730 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5731 * 5732 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 5733 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 5734 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 5735 */ 5736 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5737 5738 /** 5739 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 5740 * 5741 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5742 * 5743 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 5744 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 5745 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 5746 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 5747 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 5748 * 5749 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 5750 * without connection recovery attempts. 5751 */ 5752 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5753 5754 /** 5755 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 5756 * 5757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5758 * 5759 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 5760 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 5761 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 5762 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 5763 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 5764 * 5765 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 5766 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 5767 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 5768 * disconnect normally later. 5769 * 5770 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 5771 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 5772 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 5773 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 5774 */ 5775 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5776 5777 /** 5778 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 5779 * rssi threshold triggered 5780 * 5781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5782 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 5783 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 5784 * @gfp: context flags 5785 * 5786 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 5787 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 5788 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 5789 */ 5790 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5791 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 5792 s32 rssi_level, 5793 gfp_t gfp); 5794 5795 /** 5796 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 5797 * 5798 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5799 * @gfp: context flags 5800 */ 5801 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 5802 5803 /** 5804 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 5805 * 5806 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5807 */ 5808 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5809 5810 /** 5811 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 5812 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5813 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 5814 * 5815 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 5816 * and wake up the suspended queues. 5817 */ 5818 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 5819 5820 /** 5821 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 5822 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5823 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 5824 * 5825 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 5826 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 5827 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 5828 */ 5829 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5830 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 5831 5832 /** 5833 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 5834 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5835 */ 5836 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5837 5838 /** 5839 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 5840 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5841 */ 5842 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5843 5844 /** 5845 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 5846 * 5847 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 5848 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 5849 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 5850 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 5851 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 5852 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 5853 * 5854 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5855 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 5856 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 5857 */ 5858 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 5859 const u8 *addr); 5860 5861 /** 5862 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 5863 * @pubsta: station struct 5864 * @tid: the session's TID 5865 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 5866 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 5867 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 5868 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 5869 * 5870 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 5871 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 5872 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 5873 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 5874 */ 5875 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 5876 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 5877 u16 received_mpdus); 5878 5879 /** 5880 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 5881 * 5882 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 5883 * buffer. 5884 * 5885 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5886 * @ra: the peer's destination address 5887 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 5888 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 5889 */ 5890 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 5891 5892 /** 5893 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 5894 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5895 * @addr: station mac address 5896 * @tid: the rx tid 5897 */ 5898 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 5899 unsigned int tid); 5900 5901 /** 5902 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 5903 * 5904 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 5905 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 5906 * reordering. 5907 * 5908 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 5909 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 5910 * 5911 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5912 * @addr: station mac address 5913 * @tid: the rx tid 5914 */ 5915 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5916 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 5917 { 5918 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 5919 return; 5920 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 5921 } 5922 5923 /** 5924 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 5925 * 5926 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 5927 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 5928 * reordering. 5929 * 5930 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 5931 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 5932 * 5933 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5934 * @addr: station mac address 5935 * @tid: the rx tid 5936 */ 5937 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5938 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 5939 { 5940 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 5941 return; 5942 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 5943 } 5944 5945 /** 5946 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 5947 * 5948 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 5949 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 5950 * 5951 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 5952 * 5953 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5954 * @addr: station mac address 5955 * @tid: the rx tid 5956 */ 5957 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5958 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 5959 5960 /* Rate control API */ 5961 5962 /** 5963 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 5964 * 5965 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 5966 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 5967 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 5968 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 5969 * to be filled in 5970 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 5971 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 5972 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 5973 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 5974 * RTS threshold 5975 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 5976 * if the selected rate supports it 5977 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 5978 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 5979 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 5980 */ 5981 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 5982 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 5983 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 5984 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 5985 struct sk_buff *skb; 5986 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 5987 bool rts, short_preamble; 5988 u32 rate_idx_mask; 5989 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 5990 bool bss; 5991 }; 5992 5993 /** 5994 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 5995 */ 5996 enum rate_control_capabilities { 5997 /** 5998 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 5999 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6000 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6001 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6002 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6003 */ 6004 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6005 }; 6006 6007 struct rate_control_ops { 6008 unsigned long capa; 6009 const char *name; 6010 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6011 void (*free)(void *priv); 6012 6013 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6014 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6015 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6016 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6017 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6018 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6019 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6020 u32 changed); 6021 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6022 void *priv_sta); 6023 6024 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6025 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6026 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6027 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6028 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6029 struct sk_buff *skb); 6030 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6031 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6032 6033 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6034 struct dentry *dir); 6035 6036 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6037 }; 6038 6039 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6040 enum nl80211_band band, 6041 int index) 6042 { 6043 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6044 } 6045 6046 static inline s8 6047 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6048 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6049 { 6050 int i; 6051 6052 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6053 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6054 return i; 6055 6056 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6057 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6058 6059 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6060 return 0; 6061 } 6062 6063 static inline 6064 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6065 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6066 { 6067 unsigned int i; 6068 6069 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6070 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6071 return true; 6072 return false; 6073 } 6074 6075 /** 6076 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6077 * 6078 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6079 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6080 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6081 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6082 * 6083 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6084 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6085 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6086 */ 6087 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6088 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6089 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6090 6091 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6092 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6093 6094 static inline bool 6095 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6096 { 6097 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6098 } 6099 6100 static inline bool 6101 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6102 { 6103 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6104 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6105 } 6106 6107 static inline bool 6108 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6109 { 6110 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6111 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6112 } 6113 6114 static inline bool 6115 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6116 { 6117 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6118 } 6119 6120 static inline bool 6121 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6122 { 6123 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6124 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6125 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6126 } 6127 6128 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6129 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6130 { 6131 if (p2p) { 6132 switch (type) { 6133 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6134 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6135 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6136 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6137 default: 6138 break; 6139 } 6140 } 6141 return type; 6142 } 6143 6144 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6145 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6146 { 6147 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6148 } 6149 6150 /** 6151 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6152 * 6153 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6154 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6155 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6156 * 6157 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6158 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6159 * matching GroupId management frame. 6160 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6161 */ 6162 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6163 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6164 6165 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6166 int rssi_min_thold, 6167 int rssi_max_thold); 6168 6169 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6170 6171 /** 6172 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6173 * 6174 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6175 * 6176 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6177 * 6178 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6179 * applicable. 6180 */ 6181 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6182 6183 /** 6184 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6185 * @vif: virtual interface 6186 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6187 * @gfp: allocation flags 6188 * 6189 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6190 */ 6191 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6192 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6193 gfp_t gfp); 6194 6195 /** 6196 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6197 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6198 * @vif: virtual interface 6199 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6200 * @band: the band to transmit on 6201 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6202 * 6203 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6204 */ 6205 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6206 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6207 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6208 6209 /** 6210 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6211 * 6212 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6213 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6214 * 6215 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6216 * 6217 * private: 6218 * 6219 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6220 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6221 */ 6222 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6223 u32 next_tsf; 6224 bool has_next_tsf; 6225 6226 u8 absent; 6227 6228 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6229 struct { 6230 u32 start; 6231 u32 duration; 6232 u32 interval; 6233 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6234 }; 6235 6236 /** 6237 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6238 * 6239 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6240 * @data: NoA tracking data 6241 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6242 * 6243 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6244 */ 6245 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6246 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6247 6248 /** 6249 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6250 * 6251 * @data: NoA tracking data 6252 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6253 */ 6254 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6255 6256 /** 6257 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6258 * @vif: virtual interface 6259 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6260 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6261 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6262 * @gfp: allocation flags 6263 * 6264 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6265 */ 6266 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6267 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6268 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6269 6270 /** 6271 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6272 * 6273 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6274 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6275 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6276 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6277 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6278 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6279 * 6280 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6281 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6282 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6283 * 6284 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6285 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6286 * 6287 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6288 */ 6289 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6290 6291 /** 6292 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6293 * 6294 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6295 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6296 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6297 * 6298 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6299 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6300 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6301 * 6302 * @sta: the station 6303 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6304 */ 6305 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6306 6307 /** 6308 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6309 * 6310 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6311 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6312 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6313 * 6314 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6315 * 6316 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6317 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6318 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the 6319 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6320 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6321 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6322 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6323 * 6324 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6325 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6326 */ 6327 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6328 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6329 6330 /** 6331 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6332 * (in process context) 6333 * 6334 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6335 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6336 * 6337 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6338 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6339 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6340 */ 6341 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6342 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6343 { 6344 struct sk_buff *skb; 6345 6346 local_bh_disable(); 6347 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6348 local_bh_enable(); 6349 6350 return skb; 6351 } 6352 6353 /** 6354 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6355 * 6356 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6357 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6358 * 6359 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6360 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6361 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6362 */ 6363 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6364 6365 /** 6366 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6367 * 6368 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6369 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6370 * 6371 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6372 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6373 */ 6374 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6375 6376 /* (deprecated) */ 6377 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6378 { 6379 } 6380 6381 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6382 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6383 6384 /** 6385 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6386 * 6387 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6388 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6389 * 6390 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6391 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6392 * 6393 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6394 * this TXQ internally. 6395 */ 6396 static inline void 6397 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6398 { 6399 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6400 } 6401 6402 /** 6403 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6404 * 6405 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6406 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6407 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6408 * 6409 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6410 * internally. 6411 */ 6412 static inline void 6413 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6414 bool force) 6415 { 6416 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6417 } 6418 6419 /** 6420 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6421 * 6422 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6423 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6424 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6425 * next_txq(). 6426 * 6427 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6428 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6429 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6430 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6431 * again. 6432 * 6433 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6434 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6435 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6436 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6437 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6438 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6439 * 6440 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6441 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6442 */ 6443 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6444 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6445 6446 /** 6447 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6448 * 6449 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6450 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6451 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6452 * 6453 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6454 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6455 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6456 */ 6457 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6458 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6459 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6460 6461 /** 6462 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6463 * 6464 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6465 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6466 * 6467 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6468 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6469 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6470 * @gfp: allocation flags 6471 */ 6472 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6473 u8 inst_id, 6474 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6475 gfp_t gfp); 6476 6477 /** 6478 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6479 * 6480 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6481 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6482 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6483 * 6484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6485 * @match: match event information 6486 * @gfp: allocation flags 6487 */ 6488 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6489 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6490 gfp_t gfp); 6491 6492 /** 6493 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6494 * 6495 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6496 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6497 * 6498 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6499 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6500 * information. 6501 * @len: frame length in bytes 6502 */ 6503 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6504 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6505 int len); 6506 6507 /** 6508 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6509 * 6510 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6511 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6512 * 6513 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6514 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6515 * @len: frame length in bytes 6516 */ 6517 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6518 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6519 int len); 6520 /** 6521 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6522 * 6523 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6524 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6525 * hardware or firmware. 6526 * 6527 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6528 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6529 */ 6530 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6531 6532 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 6533